Home

Ford 2010 E-150 Automobile User Manual

1. Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Rating HC Micro Relay Powertrain control module PCM HC Micro Relay Modified vehicle and stripped chassis 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 10 HC ISO Fuel injector control module FICM 1 11 Noted 40A Modified vehicle and stripped chassis run start Starter solenoid relay Run start relay 15 40A Modified vehicle and stripped chassis battery 17 50A Auxiliary battery feed Trailer tow E eee 18 30A Electric trailer brake Trailer brake CS ee ee 22 Notus O 26 Neusd O 27 Noted only FICM coil diesel engine only 233 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Peete Lee Le 36 20A Ignition switch Grier sss omy 42 15A Diagnostic connector O0 o pidum OOOO 45 1bA Upfiters4 10A PCM keep alive power Canister vent EE ORLL 47 OA ABS coll o 48 20A Trailer tow stop lamp turn signal Wiper motor 50 Noted 0 52 10A Stripped chassis and modified vehicle BENE d edd 54 10A Fuel pump r
2. sss 30 AM FM CD srera ana 32 Compass electronic 24 GAlIDTALION 3 m creas 24 set zone adjustment 24 Controls power seat eiior is 87 steering column 69 Coolant checking and adding 277 refill capacities 280 306 specifications ssse 306 Cruise control see Speed GCONUPOL fc 67 Customer Assistance 224 Ford Extended Service IEEE 316 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada e 8 Getting roadside assistance 224 Getting the service you TNE OG 253 Ordering additional owner s literature eeeeeeeeee 258 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration PEOBEPAFU 2 eeistsstedee tee n urere 257 320 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus D Daytime running lamps see Lamps Dipstick automatic transmission zl sro RPM UR 298 ENGINE Oil Lee aee Memes 271 Driveline universal joint and SP YOKE neni redeem 297 Driving under special conditions through water sss 223 E Electronic message center 21 Emergencies roadside jump starting ssssss 245 Emergency Flashers 225 Emission control system 293 ENENG Loo dep qm MS 310 cleaning 3 2 deeem are 262 COOMA 21e 277 diesel nist to 7 fail safe cooling 281 idle speed control 274 lubricati
3. 270 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle 2 from the wiper arm Press the lock 5 tab to release the blade and pull the 2 lt SS wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL 927 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 271 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Locate and carefully remove the
4. 8 Left front tire Place the TPMS reset tool against the left front tire where the tire meets the rim opposite from the valve stem 1 as shown This is where the sensor is located inside the rim The tool needs to be held against the tire sidewall opposite the valve stem as illustrated with the arrow on the tool pointing towards the rim do not use the tool with the arrow pointing away from the rim as it may not activate the sensor 9 Press and release the green button and hold the tool to the tire sidewall until the horn sounds The red light on the TPMS reset tool will illuminate while the tool is active The horn will sound once within 10 seconds to indicate the process was successful 165 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note e If a double horn chirp is heard repeat the procedure If a single horn chirp is not heard move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least a Y turn and repeat the procedure starting with Step 1 e If a double horn chirp is heard even after the wheels were repositioned contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 10 Perform Steps 8 and 9 on the right front tire right rear tire and finally the left rear tire Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained left rear tire and the message center displays TRAINING COMPLETE Turn the ignition to off If two short horn beeps are heard the reset procedure was unsucce
5. e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 252 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing Address Ford Motor Compan
6. WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 143 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means
7. is released B RAKE The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop 198 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a traction control system TCS This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions During TCS operation the traction control active light will flash and the f engine will not rev up when you push further on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern WARNING Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a traction control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience
8. 139 318 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 Econoline eco USA fus A Accessory delay sss 65 Advance TT AG essre 200 Air cleaner filter 303 305 Airbag supplemental restraint SV GUCIM s soeur PL 102 103 and child safety seats 104 description ssessss 103 disposal 4 4 eerte 107 driver airbag ssssssse 105 indicator light e 106 Operation re 105 passenger airbag 105 passenger deactivation yalrdqm noas 108 Ambulance packages 7 Antifreeze see Engine COO anL lt iscissiasdesecessascsineiaciiarecs 277 Anti lock brake system see Brakes 197 198 Anti theft system 81 arming the system 82 Audio system see Radio 29 31 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETOTIVE a2essieresacsass 209 211 214 fluid adding 298 fluid checking 298 fluid refill capacities 306 fluid specification 306 Auxiliary Input Jack 38 Auxiliary power point 63 Axle lubricant specifications 306 refill capacities 306 traction LOK nee 205 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus B Battery cete Ee E 274 acid treating emergencies 274 jumping a disable
9. S SUIH u us queotiqn Aeadg suog sdiysioyyeam 100q y pm Ir 3909IN SSM oxeq PUPA 1070W JIOAI9S91 UO KYW V GIOJN SSM LOG 9o ueuuojgioq pue NIN u99A39q 9 E Wd USIP g3I 191030 X uorjeorr ods p10 S3lLIOVdVO ANY SNOILVOI3IO3dS LONGOYd 39NVN3 LNIVIN pm oxergq 6 e eo Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V c6TOGN ISM TO OPTMGLAX NI eNOOddN NIO OTALX AT eNOOUdIN NIO 0LLLX A eNOOSMWIN NO GLX g ucoLIqrr 9 XV WY oneu1usS OFT MS AVS ILV AT eNOOSHIN 1J amp 191030 X ILV XI eNOOWWN amp J 191030 X ALY A eNOOSHWIN J amp 191030 X quaweajddng PMD SAIUNQ 1ASAIT OQANJ UOUYIACUT PI AUG AYOAIG AONOT Tk 9 PUV T0 9 BY 03 Jojoy JIEN UOL IdV Y 0E6OZW SSM epeuep SISAT 02AS OXOe epeuen ZIdS TOZMS OX99 SM SAO 0ZM9 OX SN dS 0ZMS OXe 9T LEJ66N SSM z epeueg TIO I0 0W 9rjouqu amp g OG MG AVS 91J 1210 0 A e epeueg mo 1030JN umruradq Jadng OG MG AVS e3J J9J0 0 A e St IO 1030 N oNeyAUAS MA OS MG AVS 91I J9J030 Te SN TIO 104101 puergq IY YJU S ummuodq 06 AS AVS 91J 1210 0 A e s CIS Squid 6 9 cC AD syzenb ggr eCIT ST syrenb 6 er Xonsdip uo osuel TINA ut daoy C148 syrenb 0 9 ore orxe or p UM 0G amp 0 SPcIN 09W ping opxe dips pour peeds 3 qusbaor ping uorssrusuer orreurogny CAGLUP pm uotsstusuen oneuroqny pmyg Surro9 s Io9AO
10. STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level If the fluid level is below the FULL COLD range on the dipstick e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer 204 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the FULL COLD range on the dipstick as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull TRACTION LOK AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one
11. U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 Motorhome customers in the U S and Canada should contact 1 800 444 3311 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in Y any position or if the key is not in the ignition f XY Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists 225 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH DIESEL POWERED AND STRIPPED CHASSIS VEHICLES ONLY This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicl
12. You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski racks may reduce fuel economy Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly
13. denatured ethanol Ed85 and 15 unleaded gasoline The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power Winter blends may contain up to 75 denatured ethanol Ed75 and up to 25 unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting Refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell break down or become brittle and crack especially when mixed with gasoline Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers WARNING Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 285 2
14. f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to exit phone mode or end a call For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements UPFITTER CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Upfitter option package which will provide four switches mounted AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 in the center of the instrument 3 panel labeled AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 s and AUX 4 These switches will only operate while the ignition is in the on position whether the engine is running or not It is however recommended that the engine remain running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for extended duration or higher current draws This is even more important for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining battery power when the ignition key is in the on position When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps 15 amps or 30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or commercial uses If your vehicle is equipped with this option a relay fuse kit will be included This kit contains the required fuses and relays that need to be installed into the Power Distribution Box located under the hood Refer to the instruction sketch included in the kit and Fuses and Relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter See your authorized dealer for service There will a
15. 134 136 138 154 167 174 185 191 192 192 197 199 200 200 209 217 219 224 224 225 226 228 236 244 245 251 Table of Contents Customer Assistance 253 Reporting safety defects U S only 259 Reporting safety defects Canada only 259 Cleaning 260 Underbody preservation 265 Maintenance and Specifications 267 Engine compartment 269 Engine oil 271 Battery 274 Engine coolant 277 Fuel information 283 Air filter s 303 Part numbers 305 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 306 Engine data 310 Accessories 314 Ford Extended Service Plan 316 Index 319 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2009 Ford Motor Company 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com
16. 2 transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal 7 3 Off shuts off the engine and all Qj accessories without locking the steering wheel 4 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 5 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 192 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhau
17. 288 BUSeSE A E E E 228 G Gas cap see Fuel cap 286 Gas mileage see Fuel ECONOMY ereire ea 290 Gales uec erer REE 19 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus H Hazard flashers 225 Head restraints 85 Headlamp S ueteres 50 AIMS ASAE E E PEERS 53 bulb specifications 56 daytime running lights 50 flash to pass sssssss 51 hish Hean iiec 50 replacing bulbs 57 turning on and off 50 Heating heater only system 47 49 heating and air conditioning SYSLOI aneneen ndr eed 48 HOO tin tte 268 I grito suo eene re Fees 192 310 Illuminated visor mirror 63 Infant seats see Safety seats 117 Inspection maintenance I M TAA N oops EE Odette Cart nes 295 Instrument panel Cleaning ose etm 264 cluster eeeessseeeeeeeeenne 14 lighting up panel and JI eFIOE 2 2 eese tri 51 J Jacks 236 POSITIONING iiiseee rep rer iater pae 236 SLOIGBO ainge nave tee eive rnt 236 Jump starting your vehicle 245 Index K Keyless entry system autoloek ua iss riens 72 KEV aane a e Eod 83 positions of the ignition 192 L Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart 56 daytime running light 50 headlamps sss 50 headlamps flash to pa
18. Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 12 AN A Ae ilb O 96v See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist E o e OQ Q ddp 329 ILS 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary PURSE WONS m Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm gt Engine Oil SA Engine Coolant Temperature Ej ym Engine Coolant X Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid HH ses BD LH Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter Dp o Compartment ez e Tack lt o Check Fuel Cap E LE ings 1 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 13 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a pr
19. In order to help service your motorhome vehicle please have the following information available when contacting the Motorhome Customer Assistance Center e telephone number where you can be reached e vehicle location city and state e year and make of your vehicle e date of vehicle purchase 254 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance e current odometer reading e vehicle identification number VIN Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center Vehicle Identification Number VIN Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United
20. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port located on the instrument F O panel This feature allows you to UN plug in media playing devices NEA memory sticks and also to charge devices if they support this feature p For further information on this feature refer to Accessing and m using your USB port in the SYNC EN supplement or Navigation system supplement GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz 40 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do 4g e Handle discs by their edges on
21. TYPE XXX XXX COMPLIES 0009 300 200 33000 jumped ll INTTR TIPPS TR AMIE mi SPR X XX X XXXX XXX O OOODUUODIKX XXX DOO00X000000CXX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 171 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Gew GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 1596 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 f
22. avoid fully loading your vehicle e Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 167 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicl
23. eer dues treadwear enses 136 143 lio inar e recreational towing Trailer Brake Controller Integrated trailer towing Wre KET nerder Ee EEEE Traction control Traction lok rear axle Trailer Brake Controller Integrated Transmission sss brake shift interlock BSI 207 fluid checking and adding automatic sssusss fluid refill capacities lubricant specifications Turri signal 12 2 ere 324 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus U Upfitter controls 70 USB POTU sirere remet 40 V Vehicle loading 167 Ventilating your vehicle 195 W Warning lights see Lights 14 Washer fluid 270 Water Driving through 223 Windows POWER 32er ios d EER 64 Windshield washer fluid and WUD GES oss eee eet uere dee eT 62 checking and adding fluid 270 replacing wiper blades 271 Wrecker towing seee 251
24. engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN and MAX marks depending on application the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL e If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark add enough oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the MIN MAX range e Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine damage Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 272 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the
25. in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either Je flash or stay lit Y e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision SOS Post Crash Alert System The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners 106 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualifi
26. including ABS in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup Therefore if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may not function at full performance e When the vehicle is turned off the TBC Output is disabled and the display is shut down Reactivation of the ignition from OFF to ON will awaken the TBC module e The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or customer installation e Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the Workshop Manual Damage to the unit may result Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Using a step bumper if equipped The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a one inch 25 4 mm shank diameter The bumper has a 5 000 Ib 2 270 kg trailer weight and 500 Ib 227 kg tongue weight capacity If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components do not trailer tow during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle e To ensure proper brea
27. lines 5 must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the wall or screen 52 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 7 On the wall or screen locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line follow the next step to adjust it 8 Locate the horizontal adjuster 2 for each headlamp Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT AERODYNAMIC HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted Your vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments To adjust the headlamps 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illum
28. place the child safety seat on the left hand outboard position the center position or the right hand outboard position as desired 128 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Route the child safety tether strap over the back of the bench seat 3 3 Clip the center tether strap hook p to the tether bracket mounted iS yr under rear rail of seat cushion Eur frame Clip the outboard tether strap hooks to the tether bracket slot provided on the left side of each eee seat pedestal The slot is located between the two holes If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to yo
29. should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided 93 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear
30. will automatically exit programming mode without changing its enable status if Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds of the end of Step 3 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds 101 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again 5 After receiving confirmation the deactivation activation procedure is complete Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is a 9 inch 23 cm or 12 inch 31 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short
31. 350 Stripped Chassis 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 9000 GVWR 13000 5 4L 5897 8700 3946 60 5 52 13000 5 4L 5897 8700 3946 60 5 52 E 350 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase single rear wheel 9600 GVWR 13000 5897 ee UE 13000 esn 0 On a 181 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum Maximum Loaded Maximum Trailer Weight lb kg E 350 Stripped Chassis 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 gan 400810 egs 18500 gsn 10000 sa 60 652 E 350 Stripped Chassis 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 11500 GVWR 13000 4 10 6897 8400 3810 60 5 52 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 350 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 Gaon 9900 976 ee 18500 8391 10009 4999 ee E 350 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 gan wee egs 18500 aD 10000 999 dabas E 350 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 5897 ee ib iuo 18500 gan 10000 as 55 182 trailer si 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus frontal area of Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights A Maximum Rear Maximum Maximum Loaded axle Trailer Weight frontal area of ratio
32. 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part numbers FT 180 For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used Also available with 6 0L diesel engine TorqShift transmission 305 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications EOS IPIND SAIUNO ourguo osarp 1ue ooo JUSU JASAI oqumg wowuoetu JOELL ex o41g LONO Tg 9 PUD 10 9 BU 03 19Joq V 7 psp suy 1eou CI8 08 Syrenb g gg reor xne YM ourguo T89 qu 002 susug 2 OuSu 8 9 18 82 syvenb p08 009 outgu g Qeoy pei10 0d MoTeA bo I syen TEI KNE ujlA oulsue TV ISEL6N SSAN wisse sunong yim 1169 8 08 ma qe g d 4 0 jue o07 eulsuy ploy eu TES UIDIUI9Iq gJ l91030 A CZ 4g SEND 9 97 EL Geoy T9 pg swenb 0 97 Jeo1 xne qj outSuo T9 p que ooo susug 5 1977 sxrenb g EZ uro TON jueotiqn x2or pue SUNeIIOUI gJeJ94030 X SPU x90 syed q 660IW dS9l asealy osodunq nmypy yeas pue OFU 100p I9 U any PROBES FOX PLION s gerd Joxrng souoje
33. 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage FFV engine if equipped If your vehicle is flex fuel capable it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol Ed75 Ed85 Regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and your warranty may be invalidated It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as 288 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications possible at least half a tank Do not add less than five gallons 18 9L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration If you operate your vehicle 50 or more of the time on ethanol you should follow a different maintenance schedule In addition to this if you exclusively use E85 fuel it is also recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasol
34. AT XXXXkPa XX PSIKCOLD AT XXXXkPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTUER SHOWN ABOVE VIN X0000000000000000X TYPE XXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO XXXXX WB INTTR TP PS R AXLE TR SPR T XXXXX XXXXX XXX XX X XX X XXX 000CX000000CXX XX 311 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Vehicle identification number VIN The VIN is located on the driver side instrument panel or on the certification label It contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number Certification label for incomplete vehicles On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles the certification label is affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of the completed vehicle In these cases the completed vehicle is manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate manufacturers 312 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE 12 01 GVWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG
35. FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXXXkPa XX PSECOLD AT XXXXkPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE rt Ls AUT E SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO x XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX XX You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The following table tells you which transmission each code represents Four speed automatic overdrive 4R75E OO Q O Five speed automatic TorqShift with Tow Haul Five speed automatic 5R110W Hi Torque O Boo O 313 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by t
36. Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights A Maximum Rear Maximum Maximum Loaded axle Trailer Weight oe bane ratio Ib kg m E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 9600 GVWR 9600 4355 4700 2132 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 4 10 6897 7700 3492 60 5 52 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 10000 GVWR 10050 4559 4900 2223 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 10050 GVWR 13000 5897 eee EM 18500 6 8L 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 10050 GVWR 10050 4550 4900 2223 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 11500 GVWR 13000 5897 aa oe 18500 aep Pa ee ii o E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase single rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 9600 GVWR 9600 4355 4600 2087 60 5 52 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum Maximum Maximum Loaded a u z A frontal area of Trailer Weight 2 Ib kg trailer ft E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 dep Toes 60 652 18500 Goo 10000 as 60 652 E 350
37. In order to activate the E Guard Cargo Protection System use the key or the manual door lock to lock the side and back cargo doors e The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using the manual door lock WARNING If equipped with E Guard Cargo Protection System occupants may become trapped in the cargo area unless the exit procedure is followed The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using manual or power door locks or key fob In an emergency to exit the cargo area locate the emergency handle in the rear door or side door pull the emergency handle to unlock the door then unlatch the door using the inside release handle Emergency lock release The emergency handle in the door trim panel unlocks the E Guard Cargo Protection System The emergency handles are located in the following areas e The side door emergency handle is located on the door inner trim panel in the speaker cup 76 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e The rear door handle is located in the rear door below the glass To open the side or back cargo doors from the inside 1 Unlock the E Guard Cargo Protection System using the emergency handle 2 Unlatch the door using the inside release handle REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cau
38. O D OFF lamp will illuminate 0 D in the instrument cluster OFF e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e To return to O D Overdrive press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 3 Third Transmission starts and operates in third gear only 215 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides additional engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e The transmission will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds it will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 First when the vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Drive with Overdrive or D Drive without Overdrive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement s
39. States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer Or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle 255 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair atte
40. affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the 154 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Pr
41. and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 142 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm les ey When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended
42. attempting Note To enter the reset mode Steps 1 6 MUST be completed within 60 seconds 1 Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition 2 Press and release the brake pedal 163 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 3 Cycle the ignition from off to on three 8 times ending in the on position DO NOT start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal for two 2 seconds then release 5 Turn the ignition to off DO NOT remove the key 6 Cycle the ignition from off to on three 8 times ending in on DO NOT start the engine If the reset mode has been entered successfully the horn will sound once the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode the horn does not sound the TPMS indicator 1 does not flash and the message center does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 164 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 7 Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order 1 Left front tire Front driver s side 2 Right front tire Front passenger s side 3 Right rear tire Rear passenger s side 4 Left rear tire Rear driver s side
43. be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature 299 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications pe The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 Cp 300 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the leve
44. be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon I Y indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon C indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 295 2010 Econoline e
45. cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will
46. damage when cleaning the engine c e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations 262 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or
47. e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release SET ACCEL Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce the set speed e Press and hold COAST until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use COAST to operate the tap down function Press and release COAST to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press and release SET ACCEL Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED SYNC system hands free control feature if equipped o o Press i4 briefly to use the voice au command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold ut to exit voice command Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to end a call or exit phone mode For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement 69 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press n control briefly until the voice s icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press
48. e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than two seconds 72 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than two seconds Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled there are three methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e by using a power door unlock lock procedure or e by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on t
49. eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 W Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Also use in menu mode to select various settings In satellite radio mode if equipped press A v to tune to the next previous channel In CATEGORY MODE press W to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to Category under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to access SYNC PHONE features For further information please refer to the SYNC supplement If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A IV to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press W to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is select
50. have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death Using your vehicle as an ambulance If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it may be utilized as an ambulance Ford urges ambulance manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete Vehicle Manual Ford Truck Body Builder s Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle Modifiers QVM Guidelines as well as pertinent supplements For additional information please contact the Truck Body Builders Advisory Service at http www fleet ford com truckbbas and then by selecting Contact Us or by phone at 1 877 840 4338 Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance without the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties In addition ambulance usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody temperatures overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which could lead to fires If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label is located on the driver s side door pillar o
51. in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD IT has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Electronic throttle control RTT Displays when the engine m ai has defaulted to a limp home operation Report the fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity Check fuel cap RTT Displays when the fuel cap may not be RY properly installed Continued driving v with this light on may cause the Service Engine Soon warning light to come on refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specification chapter Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning O P light is functional it will mum illuminate when the B HAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on positi
52. indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 138 kPa greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 138 kPa greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System if equipped If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your r
53. key from the passenger air bag ON OFF switch WARNING An infant in a rear facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag is turned off Turning the passenger airbag back on The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON 2 The OFF light will briefly illuminate when the ignition is turned to On This indicates that the passenger airbag is operational Ne PASSENGER AIRBAG 108 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON have the passenger airbag switch serviced at an authorized dealer immediately The passenger side airbag should always be ON the airbag OFF light should not be illuminated unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1 2 or 3 of the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows WARNING The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes When you turn OFF your airbag you not only lose the protection of the airbag you also may reduce the effective
54. km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is pressed 219 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note The default setting for the rear camera delay is off Press the Settings button found on the navigation screen if equipped to set the rear camera delay feature to on or off When towing the camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the camera is located on the back door Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the camera system WARNING The camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNING Do not
55. lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise 4 Pull the bulb out from socket and push in the new bulb To install the new bulb follow the removal procedures in reverse order 60 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing stop turn tail side marker backup lamp bulbs The stop turn tail side marker backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace any of the bulbs 1 Turn the headlamp switch to the off position then remove the four screws and the lamp assembly from the vehicle 2 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from lamp assembly 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb To install the lamp follow the removal procedures in reverse order 61 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washi
56. lb kg m E 350 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 5897 ee PUMA 18500 BD 99 e UP idis E 450 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 6313 8500 3855 60 5 52 E 450 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 5 4L 6373 8500 3855 60 5 52 E 450 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 9072 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 450 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 9072 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 450 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 6373 9200 4173 60 5 52 E 450 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 6372 9200 4173 60 5 52 183 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum Rear Maximum Maximum Loaded axle Trailer Weight frontal area of ratio Ib kg m3 E 450 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 9072 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 450 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 9072 10000 4536 60 5 52 Maximum trailer weight for all cutaway E 350 and E 450 vehicles must be calculated by subtracting the weight of the vehicle including incomplete vehicle weight and payload which includes second unit
57. made with no trailer connected e TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT When the vehicle s brake pedal is pushed or when the manual control is activated bar indicators will illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual control input One bar indicates the least amount of output with six bars indicating maximum output e TRAILER CONNECTED This message is displayed when a correct trailer wiring connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes has been sensed during a given ignition cycle 186 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e TRAILER DISCONNECTED This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection was determined and then a disconnection either intentionally or unintentionally has been sensed during a given ignition cycle It is also displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected 2 Manual control lever Slide the control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for instructions on proper use of this feature If the manual control is activated while the bra
58. maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon cy indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately 293 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission contr
59. or e by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition off 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back on The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 74 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition off The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Back cargo door lock if equipped The passenger side rear cargo door has a power door lock control mounted on the inside of the door a When this lock is pressed all doors
60. the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For
61. tions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS mal If your tires are properly inflated and function your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON contact your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Tire rotation On vehicles with different front and without sen rear tire pressures the TPMS system sor training must be retrained following every tire rotation Refer to Tive rotation in this chapter 158 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pres Possible Customer Action Required sure Warning cause Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a descrip tion of how the system functions un der these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is in stalled in this section TPMS mal If your tires are properly inflated and function your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes con tact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled you
62. tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 140 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire inflation information All tires with Steel Carcass Plies if equipped This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls As such they cannot b
63. to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C For flexible fuel vehicles if operating with Eg ethanol an engine block heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0 F 18 C 195 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information on starting with ethanol WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord
64. traction control Engine traction control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake traction control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction control is most active at low speeds During traction control events the sliding car icon a in the instrument cluster will flash If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation TCS will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition and will continue to function during the cool down period The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Electronic stability control ESC Electronic stability control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During ESC events the sliding ca
65. using tow haul 212 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus To activate tow haul press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL indicator light will TOW illuminate in the instrument cluster HAUL Tow haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D Overdrive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed To deactivate the tow haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated When you shut off and restart the engine the transmission will automatically return to normal D Overdrive mode Tow Haul OFF WARNING Do not use the tow haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 3 Third Transmission starts and operates in third gear only Used for improv
66. wheel is on a poor traction surface Under normal conditions the Traction Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working PREPARING TO DRIVE WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger Car WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 205 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as d
67. with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 200 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction control system TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic stability control HSC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes an AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button on the center of the instrument panel and a sliding car icon j in the instrument cluster The sliding car icon n in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check or during driving if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the sliding car icon n illuminates steadily verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disable
68. 0 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 266 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel r
69. 010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel filler cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1 4 turn on off feature When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the fill
70. 0q dUISUS eserp Io eutSu q ro oulsuy Sjo od 307 Sjo 9d yeaT doy uro1sAg SulI 007 g3J J9 1030 X yes dogs uro3s s SUON FIDA uornvogr oeds p10 1 qumu 41ed pao q Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications F 7 9 e1ju92uo7 EV OTS ESM J YSLM PIPUSPUM T07 surenb g h pmg J9useA pronjspurw V 660Z UmmIolq LINIJO 097 4 CUI EF squid o6 GHELZW GHOLN MJ o xe TBUOTJUDAUOD BUC 098 4 V L61O N dSM queoliqn y oxy IY qt k k Tre sud 9 9 97D AJOL TO 06M08 4AX umud 06 M08 AVS ro mdgo PUOTIUOAUOO Lued OSE H 0ST A LUI 6 squid g9 SPEND 09IN I xe TEUOTJUBAUOD vue V GDIOON TSM Ed 162 sud z 9 y v 0S6 SPEND OOM TO OVTMSLAX M YUS OPT MGL AVS xe PUOT UJAUOO eueq OSh a IEP squid 0 6 AHELZW GHOLW ping oxy dys ponury eue 0Se a woe IO 190r prod H 06 avs CITS sud 9 9 GILIO AJOLN mp 9 xv dig pejrurrT eueq 0SE H 0S2 H xaC187 Squid 6 9 SEZIW 09W xy dig pojmurT eue uorjeorr ods p10 308 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications T0 80Z suoTTes 0 99 quey ong peuorndo eio TY Jo Woyog Aojeq WUT PT O urur 9 YOUT 9T 6 o YOUT F T 03 sexe TVI eueq TH JOyEM UL po amp rourqns uoaq seq o xe 1ea1 oq our Aue paBuey oq plnoys JULIANI ore au Toye UI peg amp eurqns ueeq seq Apquiesse opxe ay IO peambai st oorA1es pejoedsns s
71. 10 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Changing the air filter element 1 Disconnect the fresh air inlet tube from the radiator support 2 Open the clamp that secures the two halves of the air filter housing together 3 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 4 Remove the air filter element from the housing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp 7 Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the radiator support Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 304 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 4 6L V8 engine 5 4L V8 engine CoL vee engine Air filter element FA 1632 FA 1632 FA 1632 allen BXT 65 650 BXT 65 650 BXT 65 650 standard ee BXT 65 750 BXT 65 750 BXT 65 750 Oil filter FL 820 S FL 820 S FL 820 S Spark plugs Torqshift automatic transmission internal bottom pan filter Refer to the 6 0 and
72. A f mirror manually up down to increase side and rear visibility Apply pressure only in the center of the ai spotter mirror along the top or bottom edges to adjust the tilt feature Do not apply any force on the left or right edges of the standard mirror spotter section as this may lead to a mirror fracture 66 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Spotter mirror on telescoping mirror if equipped The spotter mirror has a swivel that allows it to tilt up and down and also to tilt left and right to increase side and rear visibility Fold away mirrors The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a garage with the trailer tow mirror AN N ae is a Sea lt el The telescoping feature if equipped allows the mirror to extend approximately 3 15 inches 80 mm This feature is especially useful to the driver when towing a trailer SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with s
73. A fus Seating and Safety Restraints towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can st
74. Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e On the instrument panel equipped with a cover or a cap plug e Behind the driver s seat on the upper trim panel Gf equipped e In the glove box if equipped Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped 63 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or p
75. Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 10000 GVWR 10050 4559 4800 2177 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase single rear wheel 10050 GVWR 13000 4 10 5897 8000 3629 60 5 52 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 10050 GVWR 10050 4559 4800 2177 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 11500 GVWR 13000 5897 7700 3493 60 5 52 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 4 10 5897 7700 3493 60 5 52 18500 4 10 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights A Maximum Rear Maximum Maximum Loaded axle Trailer Weight Eaa bebe ratio Ib kg m3 E 350 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 5897 ae eee ae 18500 ag jp eee iius E 350 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 10000 GVWR 10050 4550 4800 2177 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 4 speed automatic transmission 10050 GVWR 10050 5 4L 4559 4800 2177 60 5 52 E 350 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 5897 a 2 18500 6 8L 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E
76. E ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IW to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets 33 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equip
77. Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gau
78. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision 97 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt warning light and indicator chime amp The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates and the warning chime switch is turned to the on sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and the buckled before the ignition warning chime will remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster 98 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s safety belt is not The Belt Minder feature
79. ING If fail safe cooling activates pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn the engine off because the engine may automatically shut off while driving without further indication How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The service engine soon C indicator light will illuminate e The engine coolant temperature bs indicator light will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the
80. If you choose to deactivate your airbag you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the 109 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints safety belts because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner s Guide NHTSA deactivation criteria excluding Canada 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat e the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or e the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 2 Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat e although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of the vehicle or e the child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly mon
81. MS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order e Left front Driver s side front tire e Right front Passenger s side front tire e Right rear Passenger s side rear tire e Left rear Driver s side rear tire 161 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 6 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds Note The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position If a double horn is heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated 7 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds 8 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds 9 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained driver s side rear tire the TPMS tell tale stops flashing and the message center if equipped displays TRAINING COMPLETE 10 Turn the ignition off If two short horn beeps are heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard whe
82. Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water 263 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if
83. NFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL yy FRONT yy REAR y NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs XXX XX 0000 RAK SUE COLD TIRE PRESSURE see owners MANUAL Ea PRESSION A FROID FOR ADDITIONAL LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI MOM CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT22575R t6sE 200KPA 2 Psi DU PROPRI TAIRE POUR DE PLUS PNEU DE SECOURS T145 80016 P225 60R17 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 420 KPA 60 PSI AMPLES 200 KPA 29 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 169 Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapte
84. OL PUSH to increase decrease volume 9 7 CLK Clock Press CLK to toggle between displaying the radio Nes frequency and the clock setting 30 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Setting the clock Press and hold CLK until the hours begin to flash Press A IV E SEEK to manually increase decrease the hours Press CLK again to set the minutes using A IV lt q SEEK gt to manually increase decrease the minutes Allow 10 seconds to pass to confirm that the time has been set AM FM Single CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped OE Same 8 ax ae Js SS e TESI see E sene REW FF FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE I am 1 2 3 4 5 6 o a WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the radio and other electrical devices may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 31 2010 Econoline
85. ON ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 257 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to
86. RTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 315 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask you dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive c
87. Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug 123 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors m
88. Safety belts don t work Traffic is light Belts wrinkle my clothes The people I m with don t wear belts I have an airbag Td rather be thrown clear Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 4596 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted Set the example teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition on cycle the Belt Minder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only 100 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1s
89. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 14 Warning lights and chimes 14 Gauges 19 Message center 21 Entertainment Systems 29 AM FM stereo 29 AM FM stereo with CD 31 Auxiliary input jack 38 USB port 40 Satellite radio information 43 Navigation system 46 SYNC 46 Climate Controls 47 Heater only 47 Manual heating and air conditioning 48 Lights 50 Headlamps 50 Turn signal control 54 Bulb replacement 55 Driver Controls 62 Windshield wiper washer control 62 Steering wheel adjustment 63 Power windows 64 Mirrors 65 Speed control 67 Upfitter controls 70 Locks and Security 72 Keys 72 Locks 72 Anti theft system 81 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Trailer brake controller integrated Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Traction Control AdvanceTrac AdvanceTrac Transmission operation Reverse sensing system Rear view camera system Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher control Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 85 85 93 102 112
90. The system is working properly NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location that is the SIRIUS satellite blocking the SIRIUS signal or SIRIUS tower to i e tunnel under an the vehicle antenna overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return UPDATING Update of channel No action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes CALL SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS satellite re activate or resolve radio subscription issues NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement 46 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls HEATER ONLY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control VENT Distribute
91. a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identifi
92. a severe road event SLOW DOWN The TCS switch located on the center console has an indicator light that illuminates steadily in the instrument cluster when the system is off The TCS will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned off and on The TCS should normally be left on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the TCS off This may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver Remember to switch the TCS back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck If a system fault is detected the traction control active light will illuminate steadily in the instrument cluster the TCS button will not turn the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer 199 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible f
93. able to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 248 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 249 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn i
94. adlamps visually using the procedure below 51 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights To adjust the headlamps 1 Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet 7 6 meters away from a vertical plain surface 8 Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line e 5 Center of headlamps e 6 Center line of the vehicle 2 The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens a circle or cross marker or on the bulb shield internal to the lamp mark or feature Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground 2 and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter long horizontal line on the wall or screen 1 at this height masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood 4 Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line 4 If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line follow the next step to adjust it 5 Locate the vertical adjuster 1 for each headlamp Adjust the aim by turning the adjuster control either clockwise to adjust up or counterclockwise to adjust down 6 In addition to the horizontal line marked in step 2 a pair of vertical
95. any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon C indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon C indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions 294 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon X Y indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon K Y indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon Y indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to
96. ar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset COMPASS if equipped The compass heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE S SW W and NW in the message center display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is up 22 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster to four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass calibration adjustment Compass zone adjustment 1 Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referring to the zone map 2 Press and release
97. ate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 151 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is us
98. ations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy 291 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications
99. ave the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 146 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram NNNNANNNAN Nee NEN CNN ET NNNNNANNSN NNNNNNAN Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an auth
100. ay be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps WARNING When using forward facing child safety seats in vehicles with only two seating positions or the forward facing child safety seat cannot be placed in the rear of the vehicle move the passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible WARNING Because the last row of seats in the 12 passenger and 15 passenger configuration is not equipped with LATCH anchors and is spaced closer to the row of seats in front Do not use forward facing or rear facing child seats other than belt positioning boosters in the last row Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below Attach the tether strap only to the appropr
101. belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum bas
102. body weight cargo and passengers from the GCW Otherwise maximum trailer weight is 10 000 Ib 4 536 kg For high altitude operation reduce GCWR by 296 per 1 000 ft 300 meters elevation To determine the maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle as equipped follow the section Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter Your vehicle s load capacity is designated by weight not by volume so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle Distribute the load so that only 10 1596 of the total is on the tongue Tie down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the hitch Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully after any towing operation Do not exceed trailer weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg when towing with bumper only WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label 184 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Co
103. c El ppt L xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 43 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can in
104. cation number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST 258 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you you
105. cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persist replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is 39 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion USB port if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle
106. ce to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys Keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 the 3 off position to the 4 on AB position maintain ignition in the 4 2 Gf on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds 2 Turn ignition from the 4 on position back to the 3 off position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition 3 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded key insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 3 off position to the 4 on position maintain ignition in the 4 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds 83 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Pr
107. cks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER gt In folder mode press FOLDER P to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press 4i FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MPS3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 36 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In en mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite
108. cle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need t
109. cle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 86 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion e Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 130 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the top
110. co Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for more information Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature 20 80 F 7 25 C 1 Check the fluid level on the dipstick It should be between the arrows in the FULL COLD range Do not add fluid if the level is within this range 2 If the fluid level is low start the engine 3 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 4 Turn the engine off WARNING For E 350 and E 450 vehicles with the Hydro Boost Brake System do not press the brake pedal after the engine has been turned off Pressing the brake pedal after the engine has been turned off will give a false power steering fluid level reading 5 Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick Do not add fluid if the level is between the arrows in the FULL COLD range 296 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 6 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range Be sure to put the dipstick back in the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type BRAKE FLUID e E 150 E 350 Single Rear Wheel MAXA MIN A e E 350 E 450 Dual Rear Whee
111. cordance with vehicle requirements Y UI MU Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 148 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehi
112. cted cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Modification Data Recording Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and or
113. ctivate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Engine oil pressure RTT Displays when the oil pressure falls dr 2 below the normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature E RTT Displays when the engine en coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 16 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot equipped Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Traction control AdvanceTrac if equipped Illuminates when Low tire pressure warning if O the traction control system or the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately by your auth
114. d battery 245 maintenance free 274 replacement specifications 305 SOIVICIIB ciere iren tre veran ge En 274 Belt Minder sss 98 Blind Spot Spotter Mirror 221 Booster seats sssssss 130 Brakes 197 antilock sene 197 198 anti lock brake system ABS warning light sss 198 fluid checking and adding 297 fluid refill capacities 306 fluid specifications 306 lubricant specifications 306 DAP aiaccina tt ien 198 shift interlock 207 WAM CT RE 185 BUlDS descente re eid 55 C Capacities for refilling fluids 306 Cell phone use 10 Changing a tire 0 ee 236 Child safety seats 117 in front seat 118 IN Tear Seab sepe 118 LATCH uitceerec tete 121 recommendations 115 tether anchorage hardware 127 Child safety seats booster SEALS M 130 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 262 319 Index OXUGTION 1o est pe etes 265 instrument panel 264 JriterlOE 2 2 rome ets 265 plastic parts wo eee 263 safety belts sssss 265 WASHING i22 peto etnies 260 WAXING PE 261 WIUeels senser da ies 261 wiper blades 263 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 47 49 Clock adjust AM FM Stereo
115. d by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC9 Off button located on the center stack of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon n remains steadily illuminated or if the message center if equipped displays SERVICE RSC NOW have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The sliding car n indicator light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal 201 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction control system TCS Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem Engine traction control and brake
116. d seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a PEN forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back 104 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains a longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the airbag sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not sufficient enough to cause activation Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder or sodium compounds which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the SRS is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such a
117. d with accessory delay which allows you to operate the radio and other electrical accessories for up to ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is opened LA V PressA V to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings 29 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 AUDIO Press AUDIO repeatedly to gain access to the following settings BAL Balance Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting Use A IV lt q SEEK P to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FAD Fade If equipped with four speaker audio system Press AUDIO to reach the fade feature Use A IV SEEK gt to adjust the audio between the front F and back B speakers TREB Treble Press to adjust the treble setting Use A IV 4 SEEK to adjust BASS Bass Press to adjust the bass setting Use amp IV lq SEEK to adjust 3 SEEK Press lt Q SEEK P to access the previous next strong station 4 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 5 AM FM Press AM FM to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 6 ON OFF Volume Press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn ON OFF Turn V
118. de 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Lecxuem vui 34 BA Notused spre Reverse park aid Rear video camera EERE E module 37 10A Climate control Stripped chassis IP 1 BEEN RR Not used spare Radio Navigation 41 15A Radio Switch illumination Reverse camera mirror Automatic dimming rear view mirror Stripped chassis IP connector 1 battery charger relay connector 3 PADI breaker Delayed accessory Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses 231 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery disconnecting the primary under hood battery DOES NOT remove power from all circuits If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter
119. drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities in this chapter 280 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 5096 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine c
120. driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transpor
121. e 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated be low by X Re straint Type Rear fac ing child seat Forward facing child seat Forward facing child seat WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 115 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury
122. e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your owner s guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury 134 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in o
123. e In Canada www ford ca e In Australia www ford com au e In Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch Diesel and Stripped Chassis vehicles only In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Lis touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting
124. e has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated On diesel powered vehicles this switch is located in the front passenger s footwell by the kick panel 226 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus On commercial stripped chassis vehicles this switch is located on a bracket above the brake pedal To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition on 5 Wait a few seconds and return the key to off 6 Make another check for leaks Roadside Emergencies o bo lo Fuel pump shut off gas engines except stripped chassis In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the off position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the on position In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to restart and may take one additional attempt WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repai
125. e in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained 278 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Do not mix coolants Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This da
126. e information presented in the Azrbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision 117 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle unt
127. e languages are English Spanish and French Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to set the language choice Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to select system check when HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the message center For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an ok message or a warning message for two seconds Pressing the SELECT RESET stem cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows 1 XXX OIL LIFE Gas engine only 2 ENGINE HOURS 3 ENGINE IDLE HOURS 4 CHARGING SYSTEM 5 BRAKE SYSTEM 6 TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER if equipped and no trailer connected 7 TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT Gf equipped and trailer connected 8 XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you o
128. e outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning on some radios the volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 218 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The rearview camera system l
129. e specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags 112 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recomme
130. e static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e causing internal damage to the components e affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged All vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 191 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Accessory allows the electrical 4 accessories such as the radio to 3 operate while the engine is not running AB 2 Lock locks the automatic
131. e treated like normal light truck tires Tire service including adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel trained supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA regulations For example during any procedure involving tire inflation the technician or individual must utilize a remote inflation device and ensure that all persons are clear of the trajectory area A WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if improperly used serviced or maintained To reduce the risk of serious injury never attempt to re inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously under inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly for inspection Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and property 141 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Stay out of the trajectory 1 as indicated in the illustration TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises
132. ecifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced 273 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service WARNING This vehicle may be equipped with more than one battery removal of cable from only one battery does not disconnect the vehicle electrical system Be sure to disconnect cables from all batteries when disconnecting power Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the transmission must learn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly This operation is considered normal and will fully
133. ed leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 265 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 10
134. ed press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with 32 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 songs If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS DELET
135. ed as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 152 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire RAR Fy56180016 105m OY Ly 1S4 09 OL Oey 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to
136. ed personnel Passenger airbag ON OFF switch if equipped Note The passenger airbag ON OFF switch if equipped may be on vehicles with no rear seats and a gross vehicle weight rating GVWR greater than 8500 Ib 3856 kg See Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in the Tires Wheels and loading chapter WARNING An airbag ON OFF switch if equipped may have been installed in this vehicle Before driving always look at the face of the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these instructions and warnings Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 107 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Turning the passenger airbag off 1 Insert the ignition key turn the switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing the key 2 When the ignition is turned to the i ON position the OFF light NL PASSENGER illuminates briefly momentarily AIRBAG shuts off and then turns back on This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated WARNING If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch always remove the ignition
137. ed traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever 213 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e The transmission will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds it will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 First when the vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in 8 Overdrive or Drive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission if equipped diesel engines only PRND321 This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts ma
138. elated parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 267 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD dep 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and push the auxiliary latch located in the center top of the grille to the left to release the hood 3 Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod 268 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations es yZ Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Automatic transmission fluid dipstick Air filter assembly 1 2 3 4 5 Eng
139. elay coil LO qp o au 56 20A Diesel fuel conditioner module PP fee stent ony Trailer tow backup lamp 59 JjNeued O One touch integrated start OTIS diode 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits EC EN 61 CC Auxiliary battery diode i HC iene sey Uber o PA Notus 66 20A Powerpoint3 lefthand B pillar 68 50A Modified vehicle 69 Noted o 71 CC Noted o 73 Noted O VPWR 2 POM emission related powertrain components components VPWR 4 gas engine only Ignition coil diesel engine only Fuel pump relay coil 10A Cluster run start ee 7 ONE 82 Noted 88 i Fuel pump diode 84 JjNtued HC Micro relay Upfitter 1 Mini fuses AlS fuses 235 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressu
140. eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts 224 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment
141. en to minimize glare The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance 65 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Note If equipped with a reverse camera system a video image will display in the mirror or the Navigation system display Gif equipped when the vehicle is put in R Reverse As you shift into any other gear from R Reverse the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors if equipped To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Spotter mirror if equipped Note New spotter mirrors may be stiff requiring several cycles before the spotter adjustment effort eases Spotter mirror on standard mirror if equipped The spotter mirror only can be tilted from top to bottom Move the lower
142. engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can 81 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is l
143. engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon K indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter 289 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving ra
144. entation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote entry transmitters maximum of four available before beginning this procedure If all remote entry transmitters are not present during programming procedure the ones missing during programming will no longer operate the vehicle Note Ensure the brake pedal is not depressed during this sequence To reprogram the remote entry 3 d 5 transmitters 1 Ensure the vehicle is 2 O electronically unlocked 2 Place the key in the ignition and turn from the 2 lock position to 3 off 80 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Cycle eight times rapidly within 10 seconds between the 3 off position and 4 on Note The eighth turn must end in the 4
145. eplacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged if equipped Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 145 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause h
146. er cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until it clicks at least once If the check fuel cap light or a check fuel cap message comes on the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle 286 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message may not reset immediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light amp or check fuel cap message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light or check fuel cap message on may cause the CY light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may
147. erting a key or small screwdriver into the slot in the detachable anchor and lifting upward 2 Pull the seat latch handle then pull the seat toward the right side of the vehicle to disengage four pins from the floor mount 3 Remove the seat To install the seat WARNING Check to see that the seat and seatback is latched securely in position Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion WARNING Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor by pushing pulling on the seat If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop 89 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Position the seat to the floor mount 2 Pull the seat latch handle downward to lock the seat in position 3 Make sure the safety belt is not twisted then insert the safety belt tongue into detachable anchor until you hear a click and feel the latch engage Rear bench seat To remove the seats 1 Disengage the lap shoulder belt from the seat by inserting a key or small screwdriver into the slot in the detachable anchor and lifting upward 2nd row passenger side only 90 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Find the clips attached near the ends of the lap shoulder belts 3 Clip the end of the belt to
148. es exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 168 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Example only CARGO Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me st oome seg OWNERS FRONT 200 KPA 29PS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 Ps ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PS INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX2000CXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD I
149. esired starting point A GAIN setting of 6 0 is a good starting point for heavier loads 187 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual control lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lock up indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock up If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display the following messages TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC In the event this message is seen please contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair The TBC may still function but performance may be degraded WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER This message is displayed when a Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime with no trailer connected the problem is with the vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7 pin con
150. ets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent and hold the switch to open AUTO TY e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close 64 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Accessory delay With accessory delay the window switches and radio may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until any door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust dark
151. f something you may need to take action on or be informed of 26 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing the SELECT RESET stem This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message If the message will not reset or clear when pressing the SELECT RESET stem you must address the problem in order to clear the message PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied or not fully released CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime if there are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to
152. fault and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 42 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various P 4 mp3 O files may be present files with L A mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y fi mps 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps 9 of tasks on your work computer 2 mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system PT 8 J2 mp3 7 y 3 do
153. fault setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting 34 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems TRACK FOLDER MODE Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press lt q SEEK SEEK gt to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Press FOLDER FOLDER to access the previous next folder if available COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use W to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE IN auxiliary audio oA mode SYNC SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satellite radio if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability press lt q o t
154. faults sensed by the TBC Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER CONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a correct trailer connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes is sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 27 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CHECK REAR PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse Refer to Reverse sensing system in the Driving chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE if equipped Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system ins
155. ff road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 135 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a compara
156. for you when fully extended Use the shortest extender assembly that will provide adequate fit WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS 102 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING Always transport children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position and always properly use appropriate child restraints Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must transport a forward facing child in the front seat move the seat all the way back and use appropriate restraints WARNING National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position y
157. g USA fus Lights Cargo lamps The dome portion of the cargo lamp the center light can be turned on when the headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise or P asm when any door is opened With the ignition key in the accessory or on position the rear lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control Front and rear courtesy reading lamps The dome portion of the lamp the center light can be turned on when the headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise or when any door is opened The reading lamp portion the two outer lights can only be toggled on and off at the lamp BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens 55 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Exam
158. ge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat 138 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pre
159. ged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 223 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility e fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln
160. he back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position turn off the rear A C unit Gf equipped reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the PARK gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select MIX 2 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to HI REAR FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT IF EQUIPPED The rear fan controls adjust the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle 8 49 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL XX Turns the lamps off p Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZO Turns the headlamps on Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position A WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these cond
161. he defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Deflectors Running boards Interior style Cargo organization Electrochromic compass temperature interior mirrors Floor mats Lifestyle Trailer hitches and towing accessories 314 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories Peace of mind Keyless entry keypad Remote start Vehicle security systems For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission C
162. he door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 73 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is on all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to accessory and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off or to accessory Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features disabled there are three methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e by using a power door unlock lock sequence
163. he testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked 256 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATI
164. his learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear 1 Start the engine 2 Press the brake pedal 3 Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park 1 Come to a complete stop 2 Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive with Tow Haul off D Overdrive with tow haul off is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through five D Overdrive with Tow Haul on The tow haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load All transmission gear ranges are available when
165. hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn this feature on or off Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu AUTOUNLOCK if equipped This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn this feature on or off Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn this feature on or off You can also choose to turn this feature on off when the vehicle is placed in reverse Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu LANGUAGE ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish or French Note When entering the setup menu and a non English language has been selected PRESS RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to change back to English 25 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to select a new language Selectabl
166. iate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor 124 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Front passenger seating position The tether can be attached directly to the rear of the front seat i V 1 Adjust the front right hand passenger seat full forward 125 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the front right hand passenger seat as shown 3 Clip the tether strap hook to the seat pedestal at the location shown wu If the tether strap is clipped i incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision A 126 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Adjust the front right hand passenger seat to the full rearward position 5 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collisi
167. ifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 Ib 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 Ib 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations 172 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the
168. il you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling e Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 118 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufac
169. ill be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information 121 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the following locations t o e Five passenger crew van e Seven passenger wagon e Eight passenger wagon hls i e Eleven passenger wagon 122 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Q f e Twelve passenger wagon f e Fifteen passenger wagon The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments 4 ie lt lt l l l Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps
170. imilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability 237 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Full size matching spare tire wheel information This spare tire wheel will match the road tire wheel When driving with the full size matching spare tire wheel do not exceed 70 mph 113 km h It is intended for temporary use only This means if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible Stopping and securing your vehicle 1 Park on a level surface 2 Activate the warning flashers 3 Place the gearshift in P Park 4 Apply the parking brake and turn the engine off Spare tire information The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed under the rear of your vehicle except cutaway and stripped chassis models 238 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fu
171. inate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will IF observe a light pattern with a Kop distinct horizontal edge towards the cec right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line 53 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on the back of each headlamp then use a long Phillips 2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust down or clockwise to adjust up aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 Repeat step 3 5 for the other headlamp 7 Close the hood and turn off the lamps TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 42 e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn 4 signal INTERIOR LAMPS Dome lamps with rear headliner Dome lamps equipped with an ON OFF DOOR control will light when e doors are closed and the control is in the ON position e control is in the DOOR position and any door is open e headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise When the control is in the OFF position it will not illuminate when you open the doors or fully rotate the headlamp control 54 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printin
172. ine oil dipstick 6 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Engine coolant reservoir 9 Power distribution box 10 Battery 269 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID c Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components
173. ine once every 3 000 miles 4 800 km See scheduled maintenance information for more information Fuel quality Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service
174. ing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum 2 frontal area of Trailer Weight trailer f m E 350 Regular RV Van 9500 GVWR E 350 Extended RV Van 9500 GVWR E 350 Regular Wagon 11 12 Passenger 8800 GVWR 13000 5897 uu EY 13000 5897 o bei E 350 Regular Wagon 11 12 Passenger 8700 GVWR 15000 6804 iai di INN 18500 Bsp p eoe ee 177 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum Maximum Maximum Loaded a u z frontal area of Trailer Weight 2 Ib kg trailer ft m E 350 Extended Wagon 11 Passenger 9300 GVWR 13000 poo ee iun 13000 58g 9900 eae Io E 350 Extended Wagon 11 Passenger 9500 GVWR 15000 6804 99300 6765 ib iiic 18500 Bagi 10000 4599 ee E 350 Extended Wagon 14 15 Passenger 9100 GVWR 13000 sp TEMPI a 13000 Can ea ae E 350 Extended Wagon 14 15 Passenger 9300 GVWR 15000 6804 uoi gs ME 18500 ool ee biis E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 9600 GVWR 13000 Ge egm 60 652 18500 Gp eee la E 350 Extended Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 9600 GVWR 10600 4808 5700 2585 60 5 52 178 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR
175. inting USA fus Locks and Security 4 Turn the ignition from the 4 on position back to the 3 off position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition 5 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 3 off position to the 4 on position maintain ignition in the 4 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds This step will program your new key to a coded key 6 To program additional new unprogrammed key s repeat Steps 1 through 5 If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key s programmed 84 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to
176. inting USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire wheel cavity There are two different types of pressure sensors Snap in sensor the pressure sensor is attached to the back of ge the valve stem Banded sensor the pressure sensor is banded to the wheel O CO 6S SSS 155 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading In either case the pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in thi
177. is activated buckled approximately the safety belt warning light 5 seconds after the safety belt illuminates and the warning chime warning light has turned off sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled The driver s safety belt is The Belt Minder feature will not buckled while the safety belt activate indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The Belt Minder feature will not buckled before the ignition activate switch is turned to the ON position The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort 99 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given Consider T was in a hurry
178. is diagonally opposite the tire you are changing On E 450 vehicles the parking brake is on the transmission Therefore the vehicle will not be prevented from moving when a rear wheel is lifted even if the parking brake is applied Be sure to block both directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is being lifted 2 Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location e The jack is located in the rear right hand side of the cargo area 3 Remove any wheel trim Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off 4 Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut wrench about one half turn counterclockwise Do not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground 240 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park automatic transmission or R Reverse Gnanual transmission To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked Replacing the tire 1 Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack Use the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle WARNING To lessen the risk of
179. ision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat 132 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to
180. itions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever toward you to deactivate 50 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the 3 instrument panel and all applicable C illuminated switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the interior lamps Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full dome on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions The dome lamp will not illuminate if the control switch is not rotated past the detent VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AIM ADJUSTMENT SEALED BEAM HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using mechanical aimers If mechanical aimers are used and the cross car sight line is in any way blocked set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the same setting such that the cross car sight line is no longer blocked per the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used You can also aim the he
181. itor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician e causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash 110 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria Transport Canada deactivation criteria Canada Only 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must
182. its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Non adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard non adjustable head restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the seatback is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the seatback while the vehicle is in motion The non adjustable head restraints consist of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatback Properly adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position so that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head 85 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward Pull lever up to adjust seatback WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure
183. k in of powertrain components during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing drive no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades 189 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e To eliminate excessive shifting use a lower gear This will also assist in transmission cooling e Anticipate stops and brake gradually When descending long steep downhill grades always use a lower gear to provide engine braking to save wear on brakes Use Drive Overdrive OFF on moderately steep hills Second 2 on steep hills and First 1 on very steep hills Do not apply your brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached e The trailer tongue weight should be 10 1596 of the loaded
184. ke is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes e Stop Lamps Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the Center High Mount Stop Lamp presuming proper trailer electrical connection Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both trailer and vehicle brake lamps Procedure for adjusting GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing conditions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability Note This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in the TRAILER CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message center 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the d
185. km to empty DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected 21 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster XX X MPG 1 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the SELECT RESET stem press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings MPG L km amp This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a b
186. l The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for maintenance intervals If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings lubrication will also be necessary 297 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid if equipped Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period a
187. l is correct 301 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components 302 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Automatic transmission fluid filter The Torqshift automatic transmission is equipped with a serviceable transmission fluid filter located inside the transmission bottom pan Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service intervals for automatic transmission fluid and transmission filter For transmission filter maintenance see your authorized dealer AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 303 20
188. lar RV Van 8520 GVWR 11500 Quiep eee ee 12000 443 6500 0948 d E 150 Regular Wagon 7 8 Passenger 8520 GVWR 11500 4s 57 Gi ew Eia 12000 sou m GM 8100 ere aiii E 150 Regular RV Van 8600 GVWR 13000 3 73 5897 7400 3357 60 5 52 13000 4 10 6897 7400 3357 60 5 52 E 150 Extended Van 8600 GVWR 11500 5216 5900 2676 60 5 52 12000 5443 6400 2903 60 5 52 E 150 Extended Van 8600 GVWR 13000 5897 7300 3311 60 5 52 13000 5a ao 5897 a iil aa E 150 Regular Wagon 7 8 Passenger 8600 GVWR 13000 5897 ee JU PNE 13000 esn NON INE 175 4 6L 4 6L 5 4L 5 4L 4 6L 4 6L 5 4L 5 4L 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum Maximum Maximum Loaded a u 2 A frontal area of Trailer Weight 2 Ib kg trailer ft E 250 Regular RV Van 8900 GVWR 11500 5216 ed ibis 12000 Qus GX0G9 60 652 E 250 Extended RV Van 8900 GVWR 11500 Io p SHEET nd 12000 5443 M M E 250 Regular RV Van 9000 GVWR 13000 uw woes Gs 13000 5896 7400 335 7 60 5 52 E 250 Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 8600 GVWR 12000 5443 7500 3402 60 5 52 E 250 Extended RV Van 9000 GVWR 13000 gon Boem ogs 13000 506 NOD sis 176 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Print
189. lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of pe DEENEN on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by aw WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km 137 2010
190. longer properly fit in a child safety seat positioning booster generally children who are less than seat 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle safety longer properly fit in a belt positioning belt having the lap booster seat generally children who are belt snug and low at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters across the hips tall or greater than 80 Ib 36 kg or shoulder belt cen 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child tered across the restraint manufacturer shoulder and chest and seatback up right e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 114 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guid
191. low down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 216 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The reverse sensing syste
192. lso be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt cut and sealed wire located in the underhood cowl shield above the engine block PCM 70 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls They are coded as follows AUX 1 CACO5 30A AUX 2 CACO06 Green with 30A Brown Trace AUX 3 CACO7 Violet with 10A Green Trace AUX 4 CACOS 15A More detailed information about Upfitter switches can be found at https www fleet ford com truckbbas 71 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system your keys are electronically coded to your vehicle using a non coded key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your dealer supplied keys replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer POWER DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED Press control to unlock all doors Press control to lock all doors Memory lock If you lock your doors with the power lock switch or the remote transmitter while the sliding door is open the door will automatically lock after it is closed Autolock feature Note Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed
193. luminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated Low fuel RTT Displays when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the o gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened 18 High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Parking brake on warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool 19 2010 Econoline eco Owners G
194. ly Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players 41 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached Sf 4 J P CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be Q inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system de
195. ly using their seat belts Organizations that own 15 passenger vans should have a written seat belt use policy Drivers should be responsible for enforcing the policy 206 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abr
196. m RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 217 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at th
197. m may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system partially press the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button below 20 mph 32 km h Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or if the vehicle is above 20 mph 32 km h or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system below 20 mph 32 km h the sliding car icon n will illuminate steadily Pressing the 203 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or if the vehicle is above 20 mph 82 km h will turn off the sliding car n icon The switch will not allow partial AdvanceTrac with RSC system disabling above 20 mph 32 km h In R Reverse ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Sliding tions n Illuminated Default at during bulb Enabled Enabled Enabled start up check Disabled Button pressed Illuminated below momentarily solid Prale Buabled 20 mph 32 km h Button pressed again after de acuvauon or Metallum iey iia Topea driving above nated 20 mph 32 km h
198. mage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully whe
199. mal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission P RN P 2 1 l operates in gears one through four Overdrive can be deactivated by Eo pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift ON OFF q lever E The O D OFF lamp will iluminate in 0 D the instrument cluster OFF Drive not shown Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e O D OFF lamp is illuminated e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e To return to O D Overdrive press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 210 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 2 Second This position allows for second gear only e Provides engine braking e Use to start up on slippery roads e To return to Overdrive move the gearshift lever into the Overdrive position e Selecting 2 Second at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by mo
200. match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 153 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires O As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may
201. mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing the AUX and preset 1 controls simultaneously 44 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required This than two seconds to message should disappear produce audio for shortly the selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does not system failure clear within a short period present of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information Artist information not not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly NO TEXT Song title Song title information not information not available at this time on available this channel The system is working properly 45 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Category Category information not information not available at this time on available this channel
202. more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Notice to owners of diesel powered vehicles Read the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and maintenance of your Diesel powered light truck Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles
203. mps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position 2 Press cC and release again within three seconds to unlock the passenger doors and the rear cargo doors The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamp 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position One step door unlocking If the one step door unlocking feature is activated press ci and release once to unlock the passenger doors and the rear cargo doors Note The interior lamps will illuminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position Switching from two step to one step door unlocking Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled With the vehicle locked unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and holding both the e and C2 buttons simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four seconds and release The park lamps will flash twice to indicate that the 78 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security vehicle has switched to one step unlocking Repeat the procedure to switch back to two step unlocking Locking the doors 1 Press and release to lock all the doors If all doors are closed the parking lamps illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and l
204. mpts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider t
205. n Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury If you should experience cold weather starting problems on Egs ethanol and neither an alternative brand of Egs ethanol nor an engine block heater is available the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance Your vehicle is designed to operate on Egs ethanol alone unleaded gasoline alone or any mixture of the two See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on ethanol Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user
206. n a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner s Guide WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING Refer to 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for Diesel engine towing information Your vehicle may tow a class I II or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts 174 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Maximum Rear Maximum Maximum Loaded axle Trailer Weight bd x ratio Ib kg m E 150 Regu
207. n and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content for flexible fuel vehicles e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned e For flexible fuel vehicles if you are operating on E85 you may experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected 276 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Always dispose of automotive dine E batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized S A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in
208. n into N Neutral 5 Start the vehicle See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used Tr WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 208 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission P RNO 21 l SSS as Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage during coasting or deceleration When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of ser
209. n the ignition is turned to off seek assistance from your authorized dealer 11 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information Performing the TPMS reset procedure Vehicles that have wheels with banded pressure sensors TPMS reset tool A special TPMS reset tool to reset your TPMS after tire rotation is provided with vehicles that have different front and rear tire pressures The tool is located with your Owner s Guide materials 162 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Please take the tool with the provided Velcro strip on the back f and mount it in the bottom right corner of your Owner s Guide case as shown for safe keeping mol X If you find that the reset tool was not provided when delivered has been lost or no longer functions the battery is not replaceable please contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to obtain a replacement To verify that your TPMS reset tool is working press and release the button on the center of the TPMS tool The red light should illuminate and remain on for approximately five 5 seconds If the light does not illuminate the tool needs to be replaced It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before
210. n the cap is loosened slightly 279 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you
211. ndations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 113 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Recommended re EN Child size height weight or age straint type Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less Use a child safety generally age four or younger seat sometimes called an infant car rier convertible seat or toddler seat Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt
212. nector in the bumper If the message is only displayed with a trailer connected the problem is related to the trailer wiring consult your trailer dealer for assistance This can be a short to ground i e chaffed wire or a short to voltage i e pulled pin on trailer emergency break away battery or trailer brakes drawing too much current Note Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred however if the fault is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford warranty Points to Remember e Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first time e Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC according to procedure above whenever road weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from those that existed when the gain was initially set e The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the GAIN Misuse such as application during trailer sway could cause instability of trailer and or tow vehicle 188 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions The TBC does not provide anti lock control of the trailer wheels Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle e The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle
213. ness of your safety belt system which was designed to work with the airbag If you are not a person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision WARNING If your vehicle has rear seats always transport children who are 12 and younger in a rear seating position Always use safety belts and child restraints properly DO NOT place a child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag ON OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an airbag than without To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries airbags must open with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle especially in the front seat This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide
214. ng the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers 62 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control This will lock the steering wheel in position WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty
215. nge When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent 290 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calcul
216. ni spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 236 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size diss
217. ning the key to 5 start 4 v 2 Turn the key to 5 start then 3 x release the key as soon as the N 5 engine starts Excessive cranking f could damage the starter 2 i ol Note If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try turn the key to 3 off wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Cold weather starting flexible fuel vehicles only The starting characteristics of all grades of Egs ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol As the outside temperature approaches freezing ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol same as with unleaded gasoline If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions 0 F to 32 F 18 C to 0 C you may experience increased cranking times rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up 194 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is cold when operating on Eg ethanol Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter damage may occur If the engine fails to start turn the key to off and wait 30 seconds before trying agai
218. nly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern 197 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer Parking brake To set the parking brake 1 press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops To release pull the lever 2 WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until the parking brake
219. ntact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use or install hitches that clamp onto the bumper or to the axle Underbody hitches are acceptable if installed properly Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Integrated trailer brake controller if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer Brake Controller TBC When used properly the TBC helps ensure 185 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading smooth and effective trailer braking by po
220. nvironmental effects WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with the sliding door electrical contact switches Paint sealant or other contaminants could interfere with the proper operation of the power locks or radio speakers If necessary clean the contacts with Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 to remove any sealant Do not use any abrasives on the contact surfaces PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Mot
221. o Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 4 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket To complete installation follow the removal procedures in reverse order Replacing side marker bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Remove the headlamp assembly Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in this section Aerodynamic Sealed beam 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove 4 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket To complete installation follow the removal procedures in reverse order 59 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing high mount brakelamp bulbs On vehicles without a rear headliner the interior cargo lamp if equipped must be removed from under the high mount brakelamp assembly located inside the vehicle Then do the following 1 Remove the two screws from the high mount brakelamp assembly and lift the lamp from the vehicle 2 Remove the bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket To install the new bulb follow the removal procedure in reverse order Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Turn the headlamp switch to the off position 2 Remove the two screws and the license plate lamp assembly from the rear door 3 Remove bulb socket from
222. o access the previous next strong station In CD mode press di o to access the previous next CD track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt SEEK SEEK to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press SEEK SEEK to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold 4 SEEK SEEK B gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press SEEK SEEK P gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 5 SEEK In radio mode 35 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 6 gt Il OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD MP3 The CD MP3 status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections 7 SHUFFLE Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tra
223. o be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 149 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law PQ 99 pH EI PR 106 MPH wh 8S8 J mph BO KW T 1l8mph i90kwh PC I24mph 200kmh V mph 40 Wh Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Seas
224. oad wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 157 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Pres Possible Customer Action Required sure Warning cause Light Solid Warning Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure Light under tires are properly inflated refer to inflated Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended infla tion pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two min utes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn OFF Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to re store system functionality For a de scription on how the system func
225. oap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline and or ethanol vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction e FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol To identify if your vehicle is an FFV it may be equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text E85 Gasoline or check if there is a label on the fuel filler door 284 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor beer and wine It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels a small amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 2 to 5 gasoline and is suitable for automotive use During the summer season fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85
226. oblem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine it has a unique cluster refer to Starting the engine in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Vehicles with optional message center Warning lights called out as RTT are reconfigurable telltale B BE RTT indicator lights will illuminate B D mi in the optional message center These lights function the same as the other warning lights If your vehicle is not equipped with a message center the lights will appear on the cluster Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the Service engine soon 14 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing
227. ocated on the back door provides a video image which appears in the rearview mirror or navigation screen if equipped of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle O xxxxxxxx O To use the camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen if equipped The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition e 1 Rear bumper e 2 Red zone Ty e 3 Yellow zone hi o G e 4 Green zone 3 2 e 5 Centerline of vehicle Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror When shifting out of R Reverse and into any other gear the image in the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen After shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed reaches five mph 8
228. ocated in the instrument cluster Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft F system behave as follows A e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will flash once every two seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system has enabled the engine Vehicles without the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will not flash e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate the engine is enabled Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the vehicle 82 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe pla
229. ocked Note The doors will lock again the turn lamps will flash and the horn will chirp once If any door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will chirp twice Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm Press the control again or turn the ignition to the accessory or on position to deactivate the alarm Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 79 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back D surface of the circuit board f 3 Remove the old battery S TIVNIWH31N HONOLLONW Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries ATVH Y3HLO NO AYALLVE 39V ld 4 Insert the new battery Refer to d the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct ori
230. ode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating position if 95 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints equipped Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt MN b e Grasp the shoulder portion and la pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out N x e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt systems at all seating positions except the driver position which does not have this feature must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function 96 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Rest
231. ol device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon K indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon C indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or
232. on 150 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissip
233. on The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Selectable features information menu Press and release the SELECT RESET stem located in the speedometer to scroll and reset the following functions Select or reset the function by holding the SELECT RESET stem for more than two seconds TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys To reset press and hold for less than two seconds MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press the SELECT RESET stem to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0
234. on position 4 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been activated 5 Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter Note If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again 6 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed 7 Repeat step 5 to program each additional remote entry transmitter up to four transmitters 8 Turn the ignition to the 3 off position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters 9 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been exited Illuminated entry The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the on or accessory position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control if equipped must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the
235. on If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer 15 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Airbag readiness If this light fails e to illuminate when the ignition is 9 turned to on continues to flash or TN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder A chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to a
236. on greatly increases Second row bucket seats Quads The tether strap can be attached directly to the tether bracket under the back edge of the seat cushion Y 1 Route the child safety tether strap over the back of the left hand or right hand second row bucket seat e e e 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Clip the tether strap hook to the seat pedestal at the location shown ae If the tether strap is clipped i NR incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 3 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases Second Third Fourth and Fifth row bench seats For the center position of a three passenger bench seat the LT le 4 i tether strap can be attached directly to the tether bracket provided b v v under the back edge of the seat 4 EA dt cushion For the outboard positions the tether strap can be attached to the slot in the side of the seat pedestal Although tether slots are provided on the seat pedestals of the four passenger bench seat use of child seats is not recommended for these seating position locations 1 For any three passenger bench seat
237. on specifications 306 refill capacities 306 service points 269 270 starting after a collision 226 Engine block heater 195 ENNE GIL ise eee 271 checking and adding 271 CIDSUCK rrt ter eere 271 filter specifications 273 305 recommendations 273 refill capacities sss 306 Specifications 306 Event data recording 8 Exhaust fumes 195 F Fail safe cooling 281 Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 283 Fluid capacities 306 Four Wheel Drive vehicles preparing to drive your vehicle seeeeesesss 205 Biel nascentia peste 283 calculating fuel ECONOMY iussit peer ed 24 290 o SHAKE 286 capacity weeer eia EE EaR 306 choosing the right fuel 288 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 292 detergent in fuel 288 filling your vehicle with T el otreedeieis qe 283 286 290 filter specifications 288 305 fuel pump shut off switch 226 improving fuel economy 290 octane rating iuo 288 310 quality tonic esee ertet eben 289 running out of fuel 289 safety information relating to automotive fuels 283 Fuel flex fuel vehicle EEV J 55s icto erneut 283
238. oolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 4096 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling if equipped If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 281 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARN
239. or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and 116 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking
240. orcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning 261 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water
241. ording to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months perform the following 1 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to display OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for two seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100 Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the SELECT RESET stem to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 24 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Note Oil life start value of 100 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months For example setting oil life start value to 60 sets the oil life start value to 4 500 miles 7 200 km and 219 days UNITS ENG METRIC Displays the current units English or Metric Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to change from English to Metric Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu AUTOLOCK if equipped This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear and when the vehicle is in motion over 13 mph 20 km h or higher Press and
242. orized dealer For further information refer to Traction control or AdvanceTrac with roll stability control RSC stability enhancement system in the Driving chapter WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system then it was designed to be operated with RSC Reduce speed and proceed to an authorized dealer to have the system serviced immediately Transmission Tow Haul Feature TOW if equipped Illuminates when HAUL the Tow Haul feature has been activated Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation If the light flashes steadily have the system serviced immediately damage to the transmission could occur 17 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Anti theft system Flashes when A the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated f A Overdrive off if equipped 0 D Illuminates when the overdrive function of the transmission has OFF been turned off refer to the Driving chapter If the light does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Speed control Il
243. orized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements WARNING If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS tire pressure monitoring system then the settings for the TPMS sensors need to be updated Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation If the system is not reset it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary See the TPMS reset procedure in this chapter 147 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e DRW Six tire rotation If your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that Y the front and rear tires in pairs be rotated only side to side We do not recommend splitting up the dual rear wheels Rotate them side to side as a set pair After tire rotation inflation pressures must be adjusted for the tires new positions in ac
244. ost knowledge of the final application is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or powertrain cooling is required and alerting the user to the safe and proper operation Your vehicle is qualified for use as a stationary power source within limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book found at www fleet ford com truckbbas and through the Ford Truck Body Builders Advisory Service Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous operation as a stationary power source due to the potential for the normal venting of fuel vapors For stationary PTO operation of extended duration beyond 10 minutes diesel engine is recommended Further consult your aftermarket PTO installer since the duration of operation limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of 222 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom AZ of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submer
245. ough the setup menu until the message center displays COMPASS ZONE XX 23 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 3 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for approximately two seconds until the message center enters the compass zone adjustment mode 4 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem until the message center displays CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE Note This step may require up to five circles to complete the calibration Note If the SELECT RESET stem is pressed during the calibration or three minutes has elapsed since the beginning of the calibration without driving the vehicle the message center reverts back to normal operation and the CAL will display until a successful calibration is carried out 5 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE message changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED Setup menu vehicle customization and vehicle system check HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to get into the setup menu sequence for the following displays Note When returning to the setup menu and a non English language has been selected HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to change back to English Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to change back to English OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW This displays the remaining oil life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and acc
246. ourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position 103 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle Gncluding frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle WARNING Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the A risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing chil
247. ove the fuse panel cover to access the fuses 228 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery disconnecting the primary under hood battery DOES NOT remove power from all circuits To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the inside of the fuse panel cover ise imn OCT BB s Fe S Je d e foo rg Jo el icol BI N vo i Ino m e fro w fro io e I fs e e C Cie 5 ee I S ks S Le CO 5 C27 28 The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating Not used spare Not used spare Not used spare Not used spare 229 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits UJ mL cer 10A Passenger oe fuse panel ee 6 20A Tum signal Hazard Stop lamps 7 10A HMeftlowbem 8 10A fPRightlowbeamm 9 15A Courtesylamps 19 25A Notused spage 20 15A Diagnostic connector LOS except stripped chassis Demand lighting 230 2010 Econoline eco Owners Gui
248. overage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 316 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Ser
249. owering the rear latch mechanism and aligning them with the rear striker pins 92 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Engage the front LH RH hooks to the LH RH front striker pins 5 After the front LH RH hooks are engaged to the LH RH front striker pins pull LH RH seat latch release straps to allow engagement of the latch to the striker pins Refer to the illustration in To remove the rear seats above 6 Pull push seat back forward backward to check for proper seat installation WARNING Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop WARNING Do not hang or attach any cargo to the release straps of the rear bench seats Doing so could cause the release straps to inadvertently unlatch the rear bench seat If not latched the seat may cause serious injury during a sudden stop SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
250. pected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 596 or less When oil life left is between 596 and 096 the ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 096 the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed the oil 28 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS AM FM stereo system if equipped CLK S 2 6 jL1 AUDIO AM FM Y 5 VOL PUSH WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equippe
251. ped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release 4 SEEK SEEK or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use amp IV to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A IV to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu FADE If equipped with four speaker audio system Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A IV to adjust The de
252. peed control ON Press to turn on speed control OFF Press to turn off speed control RES Resume Press to resume a set speed SET ACCEL Press to set a speed or increase a set speed COAST Press to reduce a set speed Setting speed control 1 Press and release ON 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press and release SET ACCEL 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator O light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control To disengage speed control press the brake pedal Disengaging speed control will not erase the previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RES This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed 68 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Increasing speed while using speed control To increase the set speed e Press and hold SET ACCEL until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET ACCEL to operate the tap up function Press and release SET ACCEL to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments
253. personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 2 Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel e Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point 241 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Rear axle jacking points All models except E 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW and E 450 Rear axle jacking points E 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW and E 450 Front axle jacking points Place the jack under the pin on the front surface of the front axle Do not place the jack under or on the steering linkage 3 Raise the jack until the wheel is completely off the ground Turn jack handle clockwise if your vehicle is equipped with a screw type jack or pump the jack if equipped with a hydraulic jack 4 Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire 242 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies If your vehicle has single rear wheels thread the lug nuts on the studs with the beveled face toward the wheel If your vehicle has dual rear wheels thread the two element swiveling lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel 6 Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against
254. ples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of Trade number NEM SUE i 3157A or i Headlamps sealed beam Park lamp with aerodynamic Park lamp with sealed beam Side marker with aerodynamic Side marker with sealed beam 2 2 2 Map readinglamp 2 212 To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer Back up lamps 56 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs aerodynamic 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the three screws from the headlamp assembly and pull the assembly straight out 3 Disconnect the electrical connector by squeezing the release tab and pushing
255. r icon a in the instrument cluster will flash 202 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the RSC the sliding car icon n in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the RSC system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC syste
256. r dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to Attp www safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 259 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the
257. r fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 227 Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Cartridge Fuse link rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge 2a Grey Grey 34 Wee Violet 1 aa Pm Pm 3A m m 75A Bem Bom ioa Rd R 154 Bu Bw 1 ll 3 Natural Natural 4M Orange Green Green 3 Re Re Re seoa Bue Yellow Yellow Ww tan Bmw 8 L Natural Bac Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located to the left of the brake pedal and mounted onto the lower left cowl panel Rem
258. r on the rear edge of the driver s door You can determine whether the ambulance manufacturer followed Ford s recommendations by directly contacting that manufacturer 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Using your vehicle as a stationary power source PTO Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take off system DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data
259. r or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer 3 nz 4 v le GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 170 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e Example only Tires Wheels and Loading MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL 0 XXXXL XXXXKG WI WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD AT XXX KPaxX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB SRK TINTTR IPPS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XX X XX X XX XXX XX JOO0000000000 X XXXX XXXXXXX XX MFD a FORD MC MOTOR 0 vw XXxx LB SOOKE DATE xx xx RON nema ty REAR GAWR PNBE AR A XXXX B xxxK6 5000d B ib ATE TIRES PNEUS QR NM 3000 C XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXXX RIMS JAMTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PSIAPC xxx xx COLD A FROID xxx xx JUMELEES VIN 3000000000000000X
260. r the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have to be repeated on all four wheels e A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure Note Two TPMS reset procedures are given below one for tires with snap in sensors and one for tires with banded sensors 160 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Performing the TPMS reset procedure Vehicles that have wheels with snap in pressure sensors It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting 1 Drive the vehicle above 20 mph 32 km h for at least 2 minutes and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and have access to an air pump 2 Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition 3 Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off ei 4 Turn the hazard flashers on then off 3 times This must be accomplished within ten seconds If the reset mode has been entered successfully the horn will sound once the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center if equipped will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE If this does not occur please try again starting at step 2 If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode the horn does not sound the TPMS indicator 1 does not flash and the message center if equipped does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE seek service from your authorized dealer 5 Train the TP
261. r tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 20 7 kPa for a drop of 30 F 16 6 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 159 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TPMS reset procedure The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires WARNING To determine the required pres
262. radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 Ne mode If a CD MP3 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 37 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Enter
263. raints WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners Front safety belt height adjustment The front seat and outboard positions are equipped with a height adjuster Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height push the button and slide the height adjuster down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place To adjust the belt upward slide the adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder
264. re monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mi
265. recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel and e longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location using GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada To the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and conne
266. reo sss 30 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus SOS Post Crash Alert 106 Spare tire see Changing the WAVE 3i certc rette Spark plugs specifications 305 310 Special notice ssssssss 8 ambulance conversions 7 diesel powered vehicles 7 utility type vehicles 7 Specification chart lubricants eeeee 306 Speed control ssssss 67 Stability system 200 Starting a flex fuel vehicle 194 Starting your vehicle 192 194 Jump starting ee 245 Steering wheel CONE ONS iicet eret 69 N rre toeetst ite e Ed 63 deo cccsscasessasrecadestessacseondenesastead 46 T Temperature control see Climate control 47 49 Tilt steering wheel 63 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 154 MNOS iuter tcr 136 137 236 alignment 215 cnin 146 GAIe cesis AE toes cake 142 changing 236 238 239 241 checking the pressure 141 WPA eode 138 label siete PB 153 replacing ssss 144 241 VOUAUIUG coerente pere pape Red 146 323 Index safety practices sidewall information snow tires and chains 66 Spare Ure essetis R 236 238 terminology sses re Srades i
267. reparing to drive your vehicle sssesseeee 205 R Radio e e rs 29 31 Rear view camera system 219 Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for Fel qi fo ls SY ERE RN NE PP NUES UNS 115 Rel ys eise tr 228 Remote entry system 77 illuminated entry 81 locking unlocking GOONS coii ener 72 78 79 Danic alaft acest tdeo cs 79 replacement additional lransrnitbers 4e eere 80 replacing the batteries 79 Reverse sensing system 217 Roadside assistance 224 Roll stability control 200 S Safety belts see Safety VESTAS ueris 93 97 Safety defects reporting 259 Safety restraints 93 97 Belt Minder 98 extension assembly 102 HOP AGUS cit petere 94 96 fOr CHILE eem 112 warning light and chime 98 Safety restraints LATCH anchors serere ecceeeessscecceeeeeeesseeees 121 Safety seats for children 117 Safety Compliance Certification Label 311 Satellite Radio Information 43 DOES era e E m eee 85 child safety seats 117 front seats ssssssscursrencsasas 86 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSTE scere ei mee tine xe eR eges 81 83 Servicing your vehicle 267 Setting the clock AM FM single CD 32 AM FM ste
268. ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant s condition 2 Child age 12 or under A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient or the child has a medical condition that according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child s condition 111 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition that according to his or her physician e poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag WARNING This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts ar
269. riving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover Vehicle stability and handling The risk of a rollover crash increases as the number of people and load in the vehicle increase This increased risk occurs because the passenger weight and load raises the vehicle s center of gravity and causes it to shift rearward As a result the van has less resistance to rollover and handles differently from other commonly driven passenger vehicles making it more difficult to control in an emergency situation Placing any load on the roof also raises the center of gravity and increases the potential for rollover The van should be operated by an experienced driver An organization that owns a 15 passenger van should select one or two experienced drivers to drive the van on a regular basis These drivers will gain valuable experience handling the van This experience will help make each trip safer The van should be operated at a safe speed which in some conditions may be less than the posted speed limit Further all occupants should be properly restrained Most people killed in rollover crashes were unbelted Occupants can dramatically reduce their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simp
270. road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 282 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in seriou
271. rom the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon n will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled push the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle
272. rs Guide 1st Printing 2010 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA 4 6L V8 engine 5 4L V8 engine ic VID en R ired fuel 87 octane or 87 octane or 87 octane equired fue E852 E852 Sc 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 6 5 10 2 7 3 8 hus nee Pee Lee 1 04 1 20mm 1 29 1 45mm 1 82 1 42mm Compression 9 4 1 9 0 1 9 0 1 ae peo e E 1Refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Swpplement for diesel engine information 4 6L V8 and 5 4L V8 FFV engines only Engine drivebelt routing e 4 6L V8 5 4L V8 and 6 8L V10 engines without A C 310 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 4 6L V8 5 4L V8 and 6 8L V10 engines with A C IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label complete Ford built vehicles The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label is located on the structure B Pillar by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s door MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE 12 01 GVWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS
273. rst then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you are going to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes When the approaching vehicle is at a distance its image is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror As the vehicle approaches the image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror 1 As the vehicle approaches its image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror 2 As the vehicle leaves the blind spot mirror it will transition to the driver s peripheral field of view 8 221 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE Auxiliary equipment called power take off or PTO is often added to the engine or transmission to operate utility equipment Examples include a wheel lift for tow trucks cranes tools for construction or tire service and pumping fluids PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the powertrain often while the vehicle is stationary In this condition there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving The aftermarket PTO system installer having the m
274. s Roadside Emergencies To remove the spare tire 1 Open the rear doors and remove the thumb screw and anti theft bracket If finger pressure will not remove the thumb screw use the lug wrench to loosen the screw 2 Remove the access plug under the left door 3 Remove the jack handle from the right side compartment and insert the tip of the jack handle through the access hole and into the tube 4 Turn the jack handle counterclockwise until the cable is slack and the tire can be slid from under the vehicle 5 Remove the retainer from the spare tire To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed turn the jack handle clockwise until all slack is removed Tire change procedure WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 239 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Block the wheel that
275. s chapter How to identify which type of pressure sensor is on your vehicle The wheel could have either type of pressure sensor depending on the appearance of the valve stem e Rubber valve stem with snap in sensor the valve stem has a rubber seal 1 and an extra brass shoulder larger in diameter and with no treads that can be seen when the cap is removed e Rubber valve stem with banded sensor the valve stem has a rubber seal 1 with brass of a uniform diameter all the way down to the seal 156 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Metal valve stem with banded sensor the valve stem is completely metal Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged r
276. s fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment It is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e one or more impact and safing sensors 105 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e safety belt pretensioners e a readiness light and tone e a diagnostic module e and the electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness section
277. s of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 131 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a coll
278. s outside air through the instrument panel vents FLR Distributes outside air through the floor vents OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off MIX Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and the floor vents C Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm weather do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select MIX 2 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to HI 47 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls 2 9 9 the volume of air circulated in the M UE vehicle p TN 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Also controls the airflow for the rear auxiliary system if equipped See the following for a brief description on each control MAX A C Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle Air flo
279. s personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 283 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before fueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with s
280. scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 277 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir COLD FILL LEVEL T e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicl
281. se harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle tht 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key Note The lock and unlock features work when the ignition is in any position The panic feature is active when the ignition is in either the accessory off or on positions If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Note If the vehicle is equipped with the E Guard Cargo Protection System the remote transmitter Unlock command will only unlock the front doors the only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from outside the vehicle is with the key Two step door unlocking 1 Press c and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior la
282. seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle 94 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Front and rear seats 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle e Front and rear seats All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have three types of locking modes described below Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt This m
283. spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury FFV Flex Fuel Vehicle fuel cap If your vehicle is FFV capable it will have a yellow colored fuel cap bp 287 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Choosing the right fuel If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle FFV use only UNLEADED FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL Ed75 Ed85 If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle FFV then only use UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of
284. ss 51 instrument panel dimming 51 interior lamps 54 replacing bulbs 57 LATCH anchors 121 Lights warning and indicator 14 anti lock brakes ABS 198 Load mitg ir ns 167 Loading instructions 174 Locks autolock 2a 72 GOS ia cixistten cities reet eee a 72 Lubricant specifications 306 TUS nuts 43 2 oce 244 Lumbar support seats 8 M Message center 21 english metric button 26 warning messages 26 MIEFOTS 322i eee 65 66 automatic dimming rearview MITOL sink ers nde es fold AWAY 4 eren 322 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus side view mirrors power 66 Motorcraft parts 266 305 N Navigation system 46 Oo Octane rating orero 288 Oil see Engine oil 271 P Parking brake 198 Parts see Motorcraft DAUS I Gee aecenas 305 Power distribution box see FUSES eene 231 Power door locks 72 Power mirrors sss 66 Power polt snos ees 63 Power steering 204 fluid checking and adding 296 fluid refill capacity 306 fluid specifications 306 Power Windows sss 64 P
285. ssful and must be repeated If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e Use only SAE Class S chains e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle 166 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading If possible
286. ssure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated 139 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for
287. st fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all the snow and or ice away from the air induction inlet Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set e Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Turn the key to 4 on without turning the key to 5 start r7 Xo 4 M oj Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 4 on without lt tur
288. st of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs if possible The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try to push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 5 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months as per your scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components 6 If removed install the spare tire lock if equipped into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key if equipped and jack handle WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km and again at 500 miles 800 km of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt si
289. sure s for your vehicle refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information Overview Note Before performing either of the TPMS reset procedures below refer to Changing tires with TPMS earlier in this section to familiarize yourself with the type of wheels and pressure sensors on your vehicle To provide the vehicle s load carrying capability some vehicles require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning indicator at two different pressures one for the front tires and one for the rear tires Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear With this information the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures TPMS reset tips e To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle the TPMS reset procedure should be performed at least 3 feet 1 meter away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset procedure at the same time e Do not wait more than two 2 minutes between resetting each tire sensor o
290. surfaces JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine if your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for the proper jump starting procedure WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage 245 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close
291. t Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure The Belt Minder feature can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e the parking brake is set e the gearshift is in P Park e the ignition switch is in the off position e all vehicle doors and the hood are closed e the driver s safety belt is unbuckled e the parklamps headlamps are in the off position WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state After Step 3 is complete the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds Belt Minder
292. t four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 6 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity 173 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle i
293. t high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 30 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature 298 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C pe Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can
294. t yee e ssepun pesueyo IO pexoeuo eq 0 peau jou Op sjueoriqnr esauj OFT 10 POPAN pooprsuoo st I JULIANI QXL TEI orjou u S e qu perg SI 9 xe TLI SAPA noc Hs 8 V 8STIOGWALSH uoneogroeds p101 surjoeur JusTeaMbe JO E TX 1egtpojy uou JAPPY Jo TW ggZ zo g sexmber 09W epe dips pegrun ewed q og8eurep uorssrusueJ asneo ABW prp pepueuruio2o1 ou Ue 19470 prp Aue JO es TeAI93Ut 9otAI9s 1991102 BY euturme ep 0 4027mwaofua DIUDUAIULDUL PAINpaYyIS 0 JoJo pmi AT eNOOUAIN 9sn ATUO prous AT eNOOUAW 911mbo4 yey suorssruisued oneuogmy osuel Surye1edo eurrou sxorjsdip y uo uoreorpur ay Aq JOS aq p nous easy ping pue pm uorssrusuezr JO junoure au A quresse Jo 93oure1 e uj peddmbo jr pue J9 009 se 03 Io ue yy m peddmbeo JI tatoo yue ul ue qj p ddmb ji azis J9 002 uo poseq rea Lew suorjeordde ourog Ajroedeo qg Arp oyeurtxoidde ATUO sojeorpu xreur UINN qv OY pue V OEEOZW SSM UoLyeoytoeds pIo Jo sqjuouroumbou y 499W ATUO poou ro sugu amp 1ojepueul JOU ST I0 1070W puo q IN YJU S 1o IJ YJU S Jo esi apotyaa MOK ur peddmbo A reurguo od jue ooo ayy PPV 10 800 es 0 99 nq Jodng q oseqpoouA Your 9 T pue Your ggT yue ony amp 1nq Jedng y ydeoxe oseqprooua qur 97 2u 1 PNA amp 3nq Jedng y ydeoxa seqp ym your ga pue ONY Aynqg Jedng y ydeoxe eseqjooyM your segue PNA suosem pue suea q8uo popuo1xo pue re ngoJ pe yue ong uornvogr ods p1o q c c 3 Owne
295. tainment Systems 17 amp CD eject Press to eject a 4 CD 18 CD slot Insert a CD label side up in the CD slot Auxiliary input jack if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ The Auxiliary Input Jack located on the instrument panel near the radio provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your c3 portable music device to the audio 9 c system If your vehicle is equipped with a YT navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement z UII Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 38 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 An audio extension
296. terfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system include hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle For information on extended subscription terms the online media player and other SIRIUS features please contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite radio electronic serial number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in satellite radio
297. terrain Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal Close windows for high speed driving EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates Contact 292 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications your authorized dealer if the Monroney label is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions Note Vehicles over 8 500 GVW Gross Vehicle Weight will not have fuel economy information printed on the window sticker EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM tC Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled
298. that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 86 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Using the manual lumbar support if equipped The lumbar support control is located on the inboard side of the A driver s seat Turn the lumbar support control I clockwise to increase firmness Turn the lumbar support control counterclockwise to increase N softness Adjusting the front power seat if equipped The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion N NS N Press to raise or lower the rear ff portion of the seat cushion 7 7 87 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down REAR SEATS Rear captains chair adjust passenger side only Pull the lever to adjust the seat forward or backward 88 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Quick release captains chair 7 passenger configuration second row only To remove the seat 1 Disengage the lap shoulder belt from the seat by ins
299. the SELECT RESET stem to scroll through the information displays until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU 3 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK Do not hold the stem down at this point as you do not want to enter the system check Instead quickly release the stem and repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup menu until the message center displays COMPASS ZONE XX 4 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for approximately two seconds to enter the compass zone adjustment mode 5 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem until the desired zone number appears 6 Release the SELECT RESET stem and allow the setup timer to expire to exit the procedure Compass calibration adjustment Note For optimum calibration drive to an open level location away from large metallic objects or structures Switch off all non essential electrical accessories heated rear window heater A C map lamps wiper etc and make sure all the doors are closed 1 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to scroll through the information displays until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK Do not hold the stem down at this point as you do not want to enter the system check Instead quickly release the stem and repeatedly press it again to scroll thr
300. the stationary portion of the shoulder belt coming out of the trim panel The end of the shoulder belt must be clipped in order to keep it from striking anything during vehicle operation 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 91 Seating and Safety Restraints ATF OU 4 With assistance pull the LH RH seat latch release straps 1 located behind the latch mechanisms to release the latch from the rear strikers 5 Lift the rear end of seat upward and rearward by pushing on the seatback 2 and lifting the seat cushion 3 to disengage the front seat hook and the rear seat latch from the striker 6 With assistance remove the seat assembly e To remove the 3rd 4th and 5th row seats if equipped repeat Steps 1 through 6 To install the seat WARNING Ensure that the seat is installed or removed from the striker pins with adequate ergonomic assistance Due to the weight of the seat it must be handled by at least two adults during installation or removal from the vehicle WARNING Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor by pushing pulling on the seat or seatback 2 If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop 1 Please make sure the floor striker area is clean of any debris that would prevent the seat from latching 2 With assistance position the seat in the vehicle 3 Align the front hooks to the LH RH front striker pins prior to l
301. the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 144 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure
302. the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 133 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers
303. the connector forward then pulling it rearward 4 Remove the bulb assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Note If the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with alcohol before being used To install the new bulb follow the removal procedures in reverse order 57 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing headlamps sealed beam 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the four screws from the Y Y headlamp assembly and carefully remove the lamp bezel 3 Remove the four screws and the I retaining ring 4 Disconnect the electrical CJ connector from the lamp and remove the lamp To install the new lamp follow the removal procedures in reverse order Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Remove the headlamp assembly Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in this section Aerodynamic Sealed beam 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove 58 2010 Econoline ec
304. the wheel 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 8 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the following pattern Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification WARNING Never use 1 wheels or lug nuts different than the original equipment as this could damage the wheel or mounting system This damage could allow the wheels to come off while the vehicle is being driven 9 Install any wheel covers ornaments or hub caps Make sure they are snapped in place 10 Stow the jack handle and lug wrench 11 Unblock the wheels Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack hardware 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 243 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the be
305. tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 175 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAAB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 136 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can
306. to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to 196 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them
307. to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 246 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 247 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second c
308. trailer weight If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts e Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km after changing the rear axle lube e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather place the gearshift in P Park and increase idle speed This aids engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels 190 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e do not allow th
309. transmission damage refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle s Warranty Guide for more information Some vehicles are equipped with Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about vehicle modifications that for example increase horsepower and torque output this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system s memory even if the modification is removed When a dealer or repair facility works on your vehicle it may be necessary for them to access the information in the Powertrain Control System This information will likely identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system which may be used to determine if the warranty has been violated and if repairs will be covered by warranty CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable
310. ts idle conditions 250 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam and must be towed from the front it is recommended that your vehicle be towed by wheel lift or flatbed equipment to prevent damage to the air dam If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle 251 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction
311. ttention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling For information on transmission operation after the battery has been disconnected refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Auxiliary battery if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a frame mounted auxiliary battery located on the passenger side frame rail behind the front passenger door This auxiliary battery is connected to the auxiliary battery relay so it is not used to start the vehicle 275 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Battery relearn Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance Flexible fuel vehicles FFV must also relearn the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C o
312. turer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 119 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out ana 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean 120 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing US
313. two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 10 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 11 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether
314. uide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in this 0 0 mi chapter on how to switch the display from metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys Refer to Message center in this chapter to learn how to use the trip odometer Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Battery voltage gauge Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the on position If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range have the vehicle s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal operating range between L and H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil level is correct have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer 20 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on positi
315. update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage 274 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical a
316. upt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK The vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 207 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Remove the lower trim panel under the steering column Make WSS sure not disturb the wires on the electrical connector 3 Locate the brake shift interlock u A solenoid underneath the steering column 4 With your hand pull back on the solenoid and at the same time shift the transmissio
317. ur child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster 129 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehi
318. use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of power per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may sudde
319. use the camera system with the backdoor open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning 220 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer BLIND SPOT MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex spotter mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the outside mirrors They are designed to assist the driver by increasing visibility along the side of the vehicle For more information on your side view mirrors refer to Exterior mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter Driving with blind spot mirrors Before a lane change check the main mirror fi
320. vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible e If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 260 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from e
321. vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark PREM mu M MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design sp
322. vice Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings e Spark plugs except California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available e Shock absorbers Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 317 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan DHVIN 3 diz 3lvls ALIO ON LdV SSsdudav LNIHd SSV31d 3AVN 66 8908t IN 20 Je ou e208 xog Od d 3 P1043 01 SIU ew pue mojaq uoneuuojur eui ejejduioo aow ujee oL idS3 P404 YUM puipy JO 8368d auimua
323. vice or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear 1 Start the engine 2 Press the brake pedal 3 Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park 1 Come to a complete stop 2 Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park 209 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position Overdrive The nor
324. ving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in Overdrive or Drive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission if equipped 5 4L and 6 8L gasoline engines only PRND321 Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage during coasting or deceleration When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected 211 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters T
325. wering the trailer s electric brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle s brake pressure WARNING The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible with trailers having electric actuated drum brakes one to four axles and not hydraulic surge or electric over hydraulic types It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately functioning normally and all electric connections are properly made The TBC user interface consists of the following 1 GAIN adjustment buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the TBC s power output to the trailer brakes Gin 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking Pressing and holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously The gain setting will display in the message center as follows TBC GAIN XX X The trailer brake controller TBC is designed to display three items of information in the instrument cluster message center These are gain setting output bar graph and trailer connectivity status They will appear as follows in the message center e TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER The instrument cluster message center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain adjustments are
326. will lock unlock E Guard Cargo Protection System if equipped The E Guard Cargo Protection System insures that the side and cargo doors are double locked for extra security E Guard Cargo Protection System features e The E Guard Cargo Protection System is available with either power or manual door locks e The E Guard Cargo Protection System provides extra security via a double locked design e The cargo doors can only be unlocked from the outside by using the keys e The power unlock feature if equipped with power door locks will only unlock the front doors e The E Guard Cargo Protection System is equipped with an emergency unlock handle installed in the door inner panel E Guard Cargo Protection System procedure For vehicles equipped with power door locks e Lock the vehicle with the key manual door lock key fob or use the power door lock on the front door trim panel The front doors are locked and the cargo doors are double locked 75 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e Unlock the vehicle with the key fob or use the power door lock on the front door The front doors are unlocked and the cargo doors remain double locked e The only way to unlock the side or back cargo doors from outside vehicle is with the key For vehicles equipped with manual door locks e The front door locks can be locked by using either the key or the manual door lock
327. with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow th
328. ws from the instrument panel vents only If equipped with auxiliary A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear headliner vents NORM A C Uses outside air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only If equipped with auxiliary A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear headliner vents 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle VENT Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off FLR Distributes outside air through the floor vents If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor vents MIX Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor vents GW Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor vents 48 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the Q7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to t
329. y Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 CFORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 253 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing Address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing Address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Away from home motorhome service If you own a motorhome built on a Ford Chassis and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps above contact the Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealer or service location to help you In the United States and Canada Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center 900 N Lake Havasu Avenue Lake Havasu City AZ 86403 1 800 444 3311 Open 365 24 7
330. y occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park 214 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive D Drive with Overdrive is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through five D Drive without Overdrive D Drive without Overdrive can be activated by pressing the ss transmission control switch TCS ON OFF on the end of the gearshift lever e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e The
331. you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth 264 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety
332. ze and wheel Wheel lug nut torque lug nut type ft nut i 9 16 x 18 two piece lug nut Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners 244 2010 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies On all two piece flat wheel nuts apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer and the nut Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake

Ford 2010 E-150 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents